57
Home-Dzine IDEAS AND INSPIRATION FOR YOUR HOME August 2013 online Craft • DIY • Food • Green • Home Decor & Design

Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Ideas and inspiration for decorating a home, DIY projects and tips, tricks and techniques for home improvement, home maintenance and home repair

Citation preview

Page 1: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

Home-DzineIDEAS AND INSPIRATION FOR YOUR HOME

August 2013

online

Craft bull DIY bull Food bull Green bull Home Decor amp Design

2

Home-Dzine Online is written and compiled by Janice Anderssen All projects in this issue remain the property of Home-Dzine and Janice Anderssen or the respective copyright holders and may not be copied or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission

With spring just around the corner this issue looks at rooms in the home and do-able DIY projects you can tackle to give your home a new look - without spending a fortune Having made most of my own furniture I love the dining tables featured this month and will definitely be making one of myown how about you

Grab your tools and some paint and get crafty - and donrsquot forget to send me some pics of your finished projects

Janice

a word or two

5 DINING TABLEGorgeous tables you can make

31 ON THE CHEAPFurniture manufacture

14 COLOURFUL KITCHENColour combo

16 INSPIRINGBEDROOMSCreate the illusionof space and opulence

24 TIPS ON MAKINGBEDROOM FURNITURE

3

32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed

41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE

45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING

47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier

49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box

4

VivaLuxcoza

5

inspiring design

This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse

Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 2: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

2

Home-Dzine Online is written and compiled by Janice Anderssen All projects in this issue remain the property of Home-Dzine and Janice Anderssen or the respective copyright holders and may not be copied or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission

With spring just around the corner this issue looks at rooms in the home and do-able DIY projects you can tackle to give your home a new look - without spending a fortune Having made most of my own furniture I love the dining tables featured this month and will definitely be making one of myown how about you

Grab your tools and some paint and get crafty - and donrsquot forget to send me some pics of your finished projects

Janice

a word or two

5 DINING TABLEGorgeous tables you can make

31 ON THE CHEAPFurniture manufacture

14 COLOURFUL KITCHENColour combo

16 INSPIRINGBEDROOMSCreate the illusionof space and opulence

24 TIPS ON MAKINGBEDROOM FURNITURE

3

32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed

41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE

45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING

47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier

49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box

4

VivaLuxcoza

5

inspiring design

This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse

Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 3: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

3

32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed

41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE

45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING

47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier

49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box

4

VivaLuxcoza

5

inspiring design

This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse

Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 4: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

4

VivaLuxcoza

5

inspiring design

This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse

Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 5: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

5

inspiring design

This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse

Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 6: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

6

Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table

affordableDINING TABLE

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 7: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

7

BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE

To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders

Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots

or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project

For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need

4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm

Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table

Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets

TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits

DIY TIPSand all the

pieces before you

assemble

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 8: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

8

1 Assemble the top

Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface

Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws

2 Assemble the base

Join the front back and side aprons to the legs

For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets

The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg

3 Attach base to top

Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides

The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top

150

900

820 1500

40

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 9: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

9

4 Add support

To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner

Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons

GOOD TO KNOW

If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board

5 Finishing

Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish

Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table

Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish

If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 10: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

10

This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area

Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 11: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

11

If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind

Buy online at West Elm

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 12: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

12

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 13: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

13

This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports

Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 14: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

14

Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings

Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen

bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact

bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces

bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space

bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework

http

www

loop

-dne

tdan

delio

nhtm

l

Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 15: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

15

bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access

bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options

bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home

bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours

At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle

Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality

Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours

modern kitchens

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 16: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

16

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 17: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

17

inspiring bedrooms

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 18: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

18

Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic

It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 19: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

19

Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede

bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light

bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort

bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours

If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]

sour

ce h

ome d

epot

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 20: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

20

Create a focal point

For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor

bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding

bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning

bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light

bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 21: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

21

Increase the magic

Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom

bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous

bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space

bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 22: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

22

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 23: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

23

Accessorize

Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories

bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art

bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own

How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 24: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

24

Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture

On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store

When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project

Timber amp Board

In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm

Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels

Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins

You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted

TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 25: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

25

PG Bison SupaWood

Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood

- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board

- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth

- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish

If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject

To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting

You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 26: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

26

PINE

SUPAWOOD

OSB

BISONBORD

PLYWOOD

BisonBord

BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly

BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams

Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing

OSB - Oriented Strand Board

OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price

Plywood

There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications

Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 27: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

27

Pine or birch plywood

These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species

The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer

Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished

Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres

ecofriendlychoice

MelaWood

Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects

Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface

MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 28: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

28

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 29: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

29

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 30: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

30

While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive

Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth

Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder

Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are

- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar

You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers

MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 31: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

31

Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch

It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff

One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture

While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting

joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip

out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure

These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture

Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish

http

www

inee

dfurn

iture

coza

CHEAP amp NASTY

Cheap furniture

comes at a price

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 32: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

32

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 33: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

33

diy project - storage bed

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 34: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

34

609mm

609mm

1900mm 500mm

300mm

BACK SIDE OF FRAME

20 x 44 x 1900

Make two drawer box frames

1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back

2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers

3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section

MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP

SECTION

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 35: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

35

4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers

5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge

6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 36: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

36

7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports

Make the drawers

1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame

2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support

NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits

3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around

Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 37: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

37

For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame

Finally add you choice of handle or knob

These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed

For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit

Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 38: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

38

Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes

You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse

Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim

Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off

Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry

Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

http

doity

ourse

lfdiva

sblog

spot

com

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 39: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

39

Finishing

For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use

You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards

Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet

When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats

If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way

If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 40: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

40

infocountryhomedesigncoza

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 41: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

41

fresh design

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 42: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

42

We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well

There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home

LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening

BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen

BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 43: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

43

Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels

TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight

RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 44: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

44

This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours

Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal

More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 45: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

45

Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years

Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour

The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty

YOU WILL NEED

- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket

glorious gardening

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 46: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

46

STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide

STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width

Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step

STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border

STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes

STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width

STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix

STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool

STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 47: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

47

FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you

Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn

Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more

Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 48: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

48

Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden

I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier

The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges

The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 49: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

49

diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt

pw

wwbi

rdsa

ndso

apco

m20

1306

coole

r-stan

d-diy

-tutor

ial-fa

thers-

dayh

tml

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 50: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

50

YOU WILL NEED

Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired

GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there

- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level

FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o

2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o

Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm

LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)

A

B

DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to

size

C

D

D

C

A

Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 51: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

51

Preparing your cooler

You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges

Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw

1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit

If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end

2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes

Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams

3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs

Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame

GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together

150mm

540mm

A

A

B

B

B

340mm

C

C

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 52: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

52

4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes

Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats

With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section

5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre

Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit

I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges

I also glued up all the seams on the inside

Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel

On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 53: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

53

6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins

Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame

Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish

Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place

7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together

For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish

NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid

The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame

With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 54: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

54

Finishing Off

You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight

I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far

The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie

With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler

Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)

It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 55: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

55

http

www

bird

sand

soap

com

2013

06co

oler-s

tand-

diy-tu

torial

-fathe

rs-da

yhtm

l

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 56: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

56

More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops

Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops

Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200

wwwDIY-DIVAScoza

Join the Fun

Join the Fun

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza

Page 57: Home-Dzine Online - August 2013

57

IMA

GE

SO

UR

CE

IN

MA

GIN

EC

OM

IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS

ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT

SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza